Durango
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Durango
Fourth Edition Rev 2
Printed in U.S.A.
16WD01-126-AD
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .................................11
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................119
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................293
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................457
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................583
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................619
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................685
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................693
10
INDEX .....................................................................703
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe
federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you
drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
4 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out
of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
6 INTRODUCTION
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 9
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............14
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............14
▫ KeyFob ............................15
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........16
▫ General Information ....................18
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................18
▫ Replacement Keys .....................19
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming ...........20
▫ General Information ....................20
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .21
▫ Rearming Of The System .................21
▫ To Arm The System ....................21
▫ To Disarm The System ..................22
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........23
▫ Tamper Alert .........................23
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................23
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........24
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........25
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............26
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................26
2
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs .........27
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement .............27
▫ General Information ....................30
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................30
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped ....31
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ..........................32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle ..........................33
▫
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . .33
▫ General Information ....................34
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................34
▫ Manual Door Locks ....................34
▫ Power Door Locks .....................36
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................37
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY ....39
▫ General Information ....................44
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................44
▫ Power Windows .......................44
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................49
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................49
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............50
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........53
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............53
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................55
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........71
▫ Child Restraints .......................86
▫ Transporting Pets .....................112
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .112
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................113
▫ Transporting Passengers .................113
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................114
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .........................115
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................117
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature — Passive Entry
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition position does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the keyless push button ignition. Put the
nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key
fob against the keyless ignition push button and push to
operate the ignition.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The key fob also includes an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Upon opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC
or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the
ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Emergency Key Removal
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure the key-
less ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the
OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob and a Keyless Push Button
Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. If an invalid key fob is used to
attempt to start and operate the vehicle, the system will
not allow the engine to crank. If an invalid key fob is used
to start the engine, the system will shut the engine off in
two seconds.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the ve-
hicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle
Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks
and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol-
lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless igni-
tion system is OFF.
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
OFF, and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK
button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• Push the LOCK
button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK
button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle⬙ for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition button (re-
quires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry, insert a valid key into the ignition
and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock
or unlock the
doors, open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held RKE Key Fob. The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob
buttons for all key fobs.
Key Fob
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the key fob. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked
or unlocked with the key
fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked
with the key fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK
button on the key fob to
lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on
or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the
button on the key fob for at least one second
and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the
turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the
button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by
the system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to an authorized
dealership, which will deal with their disposal.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1.
Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key, #2 flat blade
screwdriver, or a coin into the slot and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to
damage the seal during removal.
Separating Key Fob Case
A — Emergency Key Release Button
B — Remove The Emergency Key
Separating Key Fob Case With Emergency Key
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery.
4. Fit a new battery in place of the depleted battery.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
battery to the + sign on the inside of the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Separating Key Fob Case With A Coin Replace Battery In The Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
5. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together until they are tightly clamped.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while
still maintaining security. The system has a
range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC
button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the DID if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors
will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine
will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the igni-
tion switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position)
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable with a one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then,
prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
the START/STOP button.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the cluster
display until you push the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering
wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For
more information on Remote Start Comfort System op-
eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOffⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of the vehicle equipment may
cause severe person injuries and death.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you push the door lock
switch while the ignition
position is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver or front
passenger’s door is open, the doors will not lock.
Power Door Lock Switches
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h).
Auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled in the
Uconnect Settings sections in the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” located in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel.”
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
Child-Protection Door Lock Location Child-Protection Door Lock Function
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The inte-
rior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature, which will function if the ignition is OFF.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fob.
If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob is detected
inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key
fob are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry
System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and
chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt, ALL
doors will lock, and the Passive Entry key fob can be
locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, pull the electronic
liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped
with Power Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle
and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open
with the handle and no key fob is required.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of
the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to
the right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push
the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
NOTE: This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the door handle LOCK button.
This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle or door handle
button. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle, without the
vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is dead.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls
are located on the
driver’s door trim panel. There is a single
switch on
the front passenger door and rear passenger doors
which operate the front and rear passenger door
windows. The window controls will operate only
when the keyless push button ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC position.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window
switch past the first detent, release, and the win-
dow will go down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-
Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up
or down direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push the
switch to the
first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
Auto-Down Window Switches
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automati-
cally.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the
switch
briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch
to the first detent and release when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
“Auto Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex-
pectedly during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window
switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for
an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Push the window
switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely and
continue to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout
button on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear
doors, push the Window Lockout
button. To enable
the window controls, push the Window Lockout
button again.
Window Lockout Button
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock when you push the button on the
liftgate. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of
the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to
the right of electronic liftgate release switch.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle”) or by pushing the LIFTGATE
button on the
key fob. Push the LIFTGATE
button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate.
Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice
within five seconds a second time will close the
liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
can be closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located
on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the
liftgate is in motion, pushing the LIFTGATE button
located on left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE
button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings),
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further
information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel.⬙
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the Liftgate
button on the key fob twice to operate the
liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will dis-
engage to allow manual operation.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 de-
grees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half of the
head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must
be reset into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized dealer
must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset
the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs that could
impair their function.
AHR In Reset Position
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF posi-
tion. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to “Warning and Indicator Lights” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight
Or Age
Recommended Type
Of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
N/A — 6 Passen-
ger
No — 7 Passenger
7 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the
center position may be removed.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Locating Tether Anchorages — 2nd Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages — 3rd Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH:
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-
tion using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-
agesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
Top Tether Location
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable (ALR) Seat
Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger) Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints
be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
7 Passenger: Only the head re-
straint in the center position may
be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchor-
ages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (60/40 Seat)
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................126
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .126
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................127
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .127
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........134
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped..........................134
▫ Power Mirrors .......................135
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........136
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped ...............136
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............137
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped ........137
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................137
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) .................143
▫ Modes Of Operation ...................145
▫ General Information....................146
䡵 SEATS ..............................146
3
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............147
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped ......149
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............150
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment .........................150
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline ............................151
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped .........................152
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............154
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......158
▫ Head Restraints ......................159
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat ..................163
▫ Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped .......167
▫ Folding Third Row ....................170
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .172
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........173
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ...............173
▫ Memory Position Recall .................174
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................175
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........176
䡵 LIGHTS .............................178
▫ Headlight Switch .....................178
▫ Automatic Headlights ..................179
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .179
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......180
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....181
▫ Headlight Delay ......................181
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights...........181
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............182
▫ Interior Lights ........................182
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................183
▫ Battery Saver.........................184
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .184
▫ Courtesy Lights .......................185
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped ............186
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................186
▫ Turn Signals .........................187
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................187
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................187
▫ High/Low Beam Switch.................187
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......188
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............189
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............189
▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............190
▫ Mist ...............................191
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........192
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .193
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED ...............194
䡵
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .195
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................196
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ To Activate ..........................197
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................198
▫ To Deactivate ........................198
▫ To Resume Speed .....................198
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............198
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............200
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................201
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .203
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .204
▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................205
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............206
▫ To Cancel ...........................207
▫ ToTurnOff..........................207
▫ To Resume ..........................207
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............208
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......210
▫ Overtake Aid ........................214
▫ ACC Operation At Stop .................214
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......215
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........216
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......219
▫ General Information....................225
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode ........................225
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ............229
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ...................229
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............231
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .231
▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................233
▫ Service FCW Warning ..................233
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................233
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................235
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............235
▫ ParkSense Display .....................235
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........242
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................242
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........243
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........243
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................245
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................247
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .248
▫ Courtesy Lights .......................249
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door ...................249
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .250
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .251
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............252
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........254
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......255
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
▫ Using HomeLink ......................257
▫ Security ............................257
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................257
▫ General Information....................259
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........259
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............260
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........260
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............260
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........261
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................261
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............261
▫ Sunshade Operation....................261
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................262
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................262
▫ Ignition OFF Operation .................262
▫ Relearn Procedure .....................262
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........263
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........268
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................269
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................269
▫ Rear Cupholders .....................270
䡵 STORAGE ............................272
▫ Glove Compartment ...................272
▫ Door Storage.........................272
▫ Front Center Console ...................273
▫ Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped .....273
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped . . . .278
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................278
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight .................278
▫ Cargo Storage .......................280
▫
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . .280
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .................281
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............283
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............283
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................284
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .285
▫ Deploying the Crossbars.................286
▫ Stowing The Crossbars..................288
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The Drivers side mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera-
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has
reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
Rear Detection Zones
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BSM warning light remaining illuminated or the alert
chime remaining on the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more informa-
tion.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light
Side Monitoring
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
RCP Detection Zones
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted for-
ward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Adjustment Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly adjusted, and you could be severely in-
jured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle
is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for
HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-
level heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of indicator lights changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING! (Continued)
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-
able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push down-
ward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-
straints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row
head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button
to power fold the
third row head restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the Headrest button. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Release Lever
Tumble Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Tumbled Second Row
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Release Lever
Tumble Strap
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console there is
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
Release Handles
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full upright
position, or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Third Row Folded
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry key fob can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
UNLOCK button is pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre-
sets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the UN-
LOCK button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and within
10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on
the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver
Information Display (DID).
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the UNLOCK button on the key fob
linked to memory position 1.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the UNLOCK button on the key fob
linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat and steering column (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the
ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Hood Release
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Safety Latch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
Headlight Switch
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ-
ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the day-
time, the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed or
not. Refer to “Lights” in this section for further informa-
tion.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the UNLOCK
button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy and dome
lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights
to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Fog Light Operation
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the key fob is pushed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Ambient Light
Multifunction Lever
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering col-
umn. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Multifunction Lever
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section
for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET-/Decel
2 — SET+/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
(Continued)
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET+/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET-/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after com-
ing to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indica-
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-
cally to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Brake Alert
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver inter-
vention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
mance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
ality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavail-
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func-
tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL
SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was
set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed
control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range,
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
FCW Message
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect
display in the controls settings.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF.
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON.
Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking ad-
equately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FCW Limited Warning
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
fully available. Once the condition that limited the sys-
tem performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem per-
sists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when performing
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-
ing with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-
ating speed, a warning will appear within the Driver
Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the DID.
It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected ob-
stacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
ing the system status.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist Ready
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Slow Tone Fast Tone
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(150-100
cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dis-
able the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the DID will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
DID.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
hitch/receiver. ⬙Different colored zones indicate the dis-
tance to the rear of the vehicle.⬙ The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the keyfob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
(i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-
held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING! (Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally and stop when the full open position is reached.
This is called “Express Open.” During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
Sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
Sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at full
closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active in Acces-
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when
the “Express Operation” feature stops working. To reset
the sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after
10 seconds.
4. Release the Close switch, then push and hold the
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and ele-
ment must be used.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console,
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage
area of the rear full center console.
Front Center Console Outlet
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from
fuse location F90 to F91.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Rear Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear full console.
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
Rear Full Console Cupholders
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear mini console.
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on
with ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted for-
ward. Push in the release button located on the back of
the lid.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage
compartment.
NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is ac-
cessed it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat
mode”. Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be
lowered below fold flat seat plane and protect the arm-
rest vinyl from damage when using the vehicle to haul
cargo.
Lower Storage Compartment
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
front of the console.
Fold Flat Mode Console Cubby Bins
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner,
is located in the front of the console.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Console Cubby Bin
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Push And Release Three-Push Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Load Floor Handle
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
Tie-Down Hooks
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
WARNING! (Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mul-
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continu-
ous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
Removing Crossbars
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.
Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving
it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
Bending Pivot
Positioning Crossbars
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
deployment of the crossbars.
Stowing The Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
Installing Crossbars
Deployed Crossbars
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup-
ports at each end.
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Crossbar Pivot
Stowing Crossbars
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Crossbar To Side Rail Tightening Crossbar
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interrup-
tion of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
(Continued)
Stowed Crossbars
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
CAUTION! (Continued)
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........297
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................298
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......300
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............301
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............314
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............327
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............333
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............335
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....336
▫ DID Displays ........................338
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset ..................339
▫ DID Messages .......................340
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............343
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........346
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped .................348
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................350
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................353
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................354
4
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............355
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings ............355
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings ............372
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ......390
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .390
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External
USB Device ..........................391
▫ Using This Feature.....................391
▫ Second Row USB Charging Port ...........392
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ............393
▫ Getting Started .......................393
▫ Dual Video Screen .....................396
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player ....................396
▫ Play Video Games .....................399
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio .....................400
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System .............................402
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped..........................403
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries......404
▫ Headphones Operation .................405
▫ Controls ............................406
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries.........407
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty ...........................407
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................414
▫ Radio Operation ......................415
▫ CD Player ...........................415
䡵 CD/DVD/BLU-RAY DISC MAINTENANCE . . .415
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .416
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........416
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................418
▫ General Overview .....................418
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............424
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......426
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . .428
▫ Operating Tips .......................432
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ..............435
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................436
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................436
▫ Get Started ..........................437
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................438
▫ Radio ..............................439
▫ Media..............................441
▫ Phone..............................442
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................444
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................446
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................447
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ............448
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ...................449
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................449
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............450
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............451
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) .....................453
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN).........454
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............455
▫ Do Not Disturb ......................455
▫ General Information....................456
▫ Additional Information .................456
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Lower Switch Bank
2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Hazard Switch
3 — Radio 8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
4 — Glove Compartment 9 — Dimmer Switch
5 — Climate Controls 10 — Headlight Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
• The Driver Information Display (DID) features a
driver-interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The
light should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for
4 minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster un-
til the light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, a single chime will sound.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the en-
gine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig-
nition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Con-
tact your local authorized dealer for service.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
AWD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
AWD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the all-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. AWD LOW is designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Refer to “All Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further information
on all-wheel drive operation and proper use.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and
is in a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the Instrument Cluster Display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to
“LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the adaptive cruise control is ON, but not set.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left
or right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light
up green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
The DID Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Navigation
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
DID Cluster Display
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or submenu
item.
DID Steering Wheel Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
DID Displays
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consist of multiple sections:
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
• Sub-menu Dots— Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is shown
here.
• Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
• Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy)
• AWD Status — If Equipped
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. Ex-
amples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
DID.
3. Push and Hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
DID Messages
Includes the following, but not limited to:
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Traction Control Off
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• ACC Override
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH or km/h
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Park Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Lights On
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Liftgate Open
• Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or green telltales area on the right, and the amber
or red telltales area on the left.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow but-
tons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the DID.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Speedometer icon is
displayed in the DID. Push and release the
LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to
change the speedometer type (Analog or
Digital). Push and release the OK button to
toggle units (MPH or km/h) of the speed-
ometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. Push the LEFT
or
RIGHT
arrow button to scroll through
the information submenus
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Push and release the LEFT
or RIGHT arrow
button until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID.
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
Analog
Digital
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
•
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function, and cannot be
reset.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Transmission Temperature
• Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
• Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
• Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Driver Assist display
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Fuel Economy Menu
icon/title is highlighted. Push the LEFT or
RIGHT arrow button to scroll the submenus,
one with current fuel economy display and one with-
out it.
• Range
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Press the OK button to rest the current and average
fuel economy
NOTE: The Range feature is not able to be reset through
the DID Controls.
Trip
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Trip icon/title is high-
lighted in the DID, then press and release the
LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to se-
lect Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Stop/Start icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. The screen will dis-
play the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Audio Menu icon/title
is highlighted in the DID.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Messages Menu icon/title is high-
lighted in the DID. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Push-
ing the RIGHT
arrow button will allow
you to see what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN ar-
row button until the Screen Setup Menu
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as
needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Current Gear
• On
• Off (default setting)
Favorite Menus
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist (Show/Hide)
• Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
• Trip (Show/Hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (Show/Hide)
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK
button to choose whether to show or hide this menu on
the DID display.
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Restore
• Cancel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID).
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected
by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, tow-
ing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
tices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons
On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4N Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Personal Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the “Up” or “Down”
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the RUN position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
“Manual” display settings. To change mode status, press
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: When “Day” or “Night” is selected for the
Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will
cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day
control even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
touchscreen then select from “On” or “Off.”
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.”
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time & Format
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.”
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• ParkSense
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-
mation.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button
on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay”
button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay
ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and
make your selection.
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
button on the touchscreen.
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer-
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. This feature can be enabled or disabled by
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pressing the “Forward Collision Warning” button on the
center stack. The feature can be can be set to Far, Medium
or Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near”, “Medium”
or “Far” button.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
touchscreen, indicating that the setting had been selected.
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime
Volume” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the
setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Brak-
ing Assist” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
doors are unlocked with the Key Fob. To change the
Illuminated Approach status, press the “Illuminated Ap-
proach” button and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or
90 seconds.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
the touchscreen and make your selection.
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your selec-
tion. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen and make your selection.
• Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Key Fob
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lights w/Lock” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob
or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lights w/Lock” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Horn w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the key fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on
the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or
“2nd Press.”
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Remote Door Unlock
When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may
choose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all
doors unlock with the first push of the key fob. Select
“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the
first push of the key fob.
NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped.
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or
unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Pas-
sive Entry” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.” Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the key fob is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and
select from “On” or “Off.”
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.”
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay”
button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,”
“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “En-
gine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and
choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to
select your desired time interval.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
• Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
Once properly set, the compass will automatically com-
pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
• Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
Compass Variance Zone Map
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch-
screen when the compass has been successfully cali-
brated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
reset to default.⬙
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,
or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Personal Settings
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, select from
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
• Set Theme
This feature will allow you to choose a background
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
background color, highlight color, and button color of the
display screen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan-
guage button on the touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Controls Screen Time-Out
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster —
If Equipped
To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-
Turn Displayed In Cluster” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
“12 hrs” or “24 hrs” setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. This feature can be enabled or disabled by
pressing the “Forward Collision Warning” button on the
center stack. The feature can be can be set to Far, Medium
or Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near”, “Medium”
or “Far” button.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. For further
information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
• ParkSense
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the “Sound” or “Sound and Display” button. Refer
to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime
Volume” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known con-
figuration state through ignition cycles.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Brak-
ing Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer-
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Key Fob. To change the Illumi-
nated Approach status, press the “+” or “–” button on the
touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Key Fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the sound
horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press
the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automati-
cally when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press the “Auto Door Locks” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob,
or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may
be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash
Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of key fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob UNLOCK button. You must press the
key fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
key fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key
fob).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Pas-
sive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the key fob is used to unlock the door. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touch-
screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that setting has been selected.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “+” or “-”
button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes,” or “10 minutes.”
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Offset
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the back-
ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touch-
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
stating ⬙Settings Reset To Default.⬙
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal Data Cleared.”
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information
screen will appear displaying the system software version.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the lower section of
the front integrated center stack, in front of the rotary
transmission gear selector.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicles iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX SD Card
Media HUB
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
NOTE: For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second row USB connector ports can be used for charg-
ing purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an
iPod or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging
ports which are located either on the rear of the front
center console and/or in the second row center console.
Front Center Console Rear USB Ports
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over
the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Second Row Center Console USB Port
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon
will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by push-
ing the Power button on the remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-
ray Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
RSE System Screen
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger side).
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu-
pants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray Disc player is located in the center console.
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen,
the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side
rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
Rear Media Control Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
is not highlighted, select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle.
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
is not highlighted, select button to access controls for
Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
control screen.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change source for the active (high-
lighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
playing the Blu-ray Disc on the touchscreen radio.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
then press the source key, and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
ENTER/OK.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touch-
screen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the
DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA col-
umn. To exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote
control functions for DVD play such as scene selection,
Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultane-
ously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video
source will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear
1.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video
source will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear
2.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan-
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
current audio track or video chapter.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the
DVD title menu, or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to
source selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1.
Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi-
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired re-
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding
your Unwired wireless headphones, please phone
1-888-293-3332 or email
customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pushing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appear-
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circum-
stances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Video Screen Display Settings
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se-
lect the next available audio mode without using the
Mode/Source Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of the playing the
following types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter discs :
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-
ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also
play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW
disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension
to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and
Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during ex-
tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s inte-
rior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics
of the Blu-ray Disc player.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD/BLU-RAY DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc in good condition, take
the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.), the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
16. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the Uconnect customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in this section of
the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
in the Uconnect system, located on the instrument panel.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Rear Climate Controls
Touchscreen
1 — Press Blower Up Button
2 — Press Mode Button
3 — Press Temperature Button
4—
Press Blower Down Button
5 — Press Done Button
6 — Press Rear Lock Button
7 — Press Rear Auto Button
8 — Press Rear Off Button
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection.
2. Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants.
3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display will appear. Control functions now
operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Uconnect 8.4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear Mode 5 — AUTO Mode
2 — Rear Tempera-
ture
4 — Rear Tempera-
ture Lock
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem-
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the rear passenger door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload,
causing damage to the blower motor.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
Rear Mode Control
• Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode
and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
• Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. A
solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) cool-
ant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
proper coolant selection.
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes
a problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to
fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4AN
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Assist Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
Mobile App
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice
to search for the most popular places or things around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3.
Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
push the VR button
, then say: “YELP search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
SiriusXM Travel Link
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................462
▫ Automatic Transmission ................462
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...........463
▫ Normal Starting.......................464
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................465
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................466
▫ After Starting ........................467
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......467
▫ Automatic Mode .....................467
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop ........................468
▫
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .469
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .470
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .470
▫ System Malfunction ...................470
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .471
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............471
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ..................473
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .473
5
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ..............474
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission .......475
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ............483
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..........484
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped .......................484
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Three-
Position Switch) — If Equipped ...........484
▫ Shifting Procedure .....................489
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................490
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................491
▫ When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped . . . .491
▫ Driving Through Water .................491
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........493
▫ Hill Climbing ........................493
▫ Traction Downhill .....................494
▫ After Driving Off-Road .................494
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .............496
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED .......................497
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................497
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................500
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .500
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .501
▫ Brake System Warning Light..............501
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............501
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............503
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............503
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................504
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............507
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........507
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........512
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped . . .513
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB)...............514
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS)................514
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........514
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............515
▫ Tire Markings ........................515
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........518
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........520
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........521
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........526
▫ Tire Pressure ........................526
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................528
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .529
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................529
▫ Tire Types ...........................530
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............532
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............532
▫ Tire Spinning ........................536
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................536
▫ Life Of Tire .........................537
▫ Replacement Tires .....................538
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......539
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....541
䡵 Premium System .......................542
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings ...........................543
▫ Service TPM System Warning .............544
▫ TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped .........545
▫ General Information ...................546
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................547
▫ 3.6L Engine .........................547
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................547
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................548
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................548
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............549
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . .550
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .....550
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................550
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................551
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............552
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................553
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........555
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................556
▫ Certification Label ....................556
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................559
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............559
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............562
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................564
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped..........................565
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............567
▫ Towing Requirements ..................567
▫ Towing Tips .........................572
䡵 SNOW PLOW .........................573
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................574
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .574
▫ Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models .............................575
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) ..............575
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) ...............576
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the fob with Integrated
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage auto-
matically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the DID will display a
“Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If the gear selector is in Neutral, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
“ACC”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
display “ON/RUN”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automati-
cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and
if all other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/
Start section. Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the DID Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not
stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AU-
TOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the STOP/START system going into a
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-
tions of the items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
STOP/START Off Switch
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver In-
formation Display (DID)“ in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the DID, have the system checked by your authorized
dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
WARNING! (Continued)
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK when-
ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Push the “eco” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel to activate or disable ECO mode. An
amber light on the switch indicates when ECO mode is
disabled.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The overall driving performance will be more conser-
vative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
ited based on temperature and other factors.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To
select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (shift
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
paddles mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the
shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE range will manu-
ally select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Electronic Gear Selector
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the electronically
shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in
AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD
Control Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light
is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
WARNING! (Continued)
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
“OFF”, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle. The transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm. Normal operation will resume once the trans-
mission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE, it will operate
automatically, shifting between the eight available gears.
To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter
AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode
will retain the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the
current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE: The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled,
as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Settings.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
provide improved throttle response and modified shift-
ing for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on
the instrument panel switch bank.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time all-
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
center console.
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shift-
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. Refer to “Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Panel” for further information. When you select a differ-
ent transfer case position, the position indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning prop-
erly and that service is required.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
AWD Auto
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drive-
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Neutral (N)
Neutral – This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control knob back to the original posi-
tion, make certain all shift requirements have been met,
wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
AWD Auto To Low Range
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position and
engine running, shift the transmission to Neutral.
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator
light will flash continuously while the original position
indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been
met.
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the RUN
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case NEUTRAL N
shift procedure. Refer to “Shifting Into NEUTRAL N” in
“Recreational Towing”.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
LOW range.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami-
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to pre-
vent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower
gear than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be-
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care-
fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compres-
sion drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Pro-
grammable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
WARNING! (Continued)
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further informa-
tion.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
WARNING! (Continued)
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
(Continued)
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the THULE XG-12 PRO
traction device or equivalent is recommended on
P265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Driver Information Display
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
DID will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an ⬙Inflate to
XXX⬙ message and a graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
play of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the DID will still display a pressure value in
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to XXX
kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then dis-
play dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on and the instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with
the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer
chime or flash the TPM telltale and display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster display
but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off, and the instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument
cluster will also display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed as
long as no system fault exists.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide op-
timum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide sat-
isfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality un-
leaded gasoline having an octane
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable stan-
dard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline
with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
Release Cable
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
WARNING! (Continued)
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine Model
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L RWD Light
Duty Cooling
8,900 lbs
(4,037 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3.6L RWD 11,600 lbs
(5,262 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2,812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L AWD Light
Duty Cooling
8,900 lbs
(4,037 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3.6L AWD 11,600 lbs
(5,262 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2,812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L RWD 13,100 lbs
(5,942 kg)
60 sq ft
(5.57 sq m)
7,400 lbs
(3,357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
5.7L AWD 13,100 lbs
(5,942 kg)
60 sq ft
(5.57 sq m)
7,200 lbs
(3,266 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch re-
ceiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward
(towards you).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in
reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
Hitch Receiver Cover Retainers
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
Hitch Receiver Cover
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4.
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel
Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Single-Speed Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
• See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational tow-
ing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
(Continued)
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lo-
cated by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEU-
TRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
off will automatically place the transmission in
PARK.
11. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button again (with-
out pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
ignition to the OFF position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lo-
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine
OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........585
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............585
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................586
▫ Torque Specifications ...................586
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........588
▫ Jack Location ........................589
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................590
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................591
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................594
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................595
▫ Road Tire Installation ..................602
䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL ............602
䡵 JUMP-STARTING ......................603
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............604
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................606
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............608
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .609
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................610
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........614
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
Jack Storage Location
Thumb Screw Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Location
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the
winch stops.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear bumper.
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
Spare Tire
Tab Location
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push
it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
Sleeve And Cable
Releasing Protective Plate
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack Warning Label
Jack And Tool Assembly
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange just
behind the front tire. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
4.
For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
Front Jack Location
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque
Specifications in this section for proper lug nut torque.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the “beauty side”
facing rearward.
NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from
being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
“Beauty Side”
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end
of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped
cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and
protective plate.
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec-
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat
shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on
the winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Installing Winch
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mecha-
nism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro
straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the
jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw
clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
the jack and tire changing tools. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Fuel Funnel
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen-
ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to either vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at your authorized dealer.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
Release Latch
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simulta-
neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
Released Position
612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
Release Latch Stowed Position
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the trans-
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE If Transmission
Is Operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED See Instructions in
“Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And
Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Front If Transmission Is Oper-
able:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Rear Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case
may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed instruc-
tions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........621
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L ..........622
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .623
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................623
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................624
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................626
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................626
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........627
▫ Engine Oil ..........................627
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................630
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................631
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............632
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............633
▫ Body Lubrication .....................638
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............638
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................641
▫ Exhaust System ......................641
▫ Cooling System ......................644
7
▫ Brake System ........................650
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid ..................651
▫ Transfer Case ........................652
▫ Automatic Transmission ................653
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion ......................655
䡵 FUSES ..............................663
▫ Power Distribution Center ...............664
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................672
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................673
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................675
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped .......................675
▫ Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped ......676
▫ Front Turn Signal .....................677
▫ Front Fog Lamps .....................677
▫ Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps ......678
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps ......678
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .678
▫ Rear License Lamp ....................678
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................679
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................681
▫ Engine .............................681
▫ Chassis ............................683
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Reservoir) 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance
Schedules” section for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a —
If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf —
If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-
fine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manu-
facturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart-
ment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on
the right side to fully remove the cover.
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove com-
partment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage
the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid
level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic
outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
CAUTION! (Continued)
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
WARNING! (Continued)
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immedi-
ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” mark
and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be kept within
these two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark,
because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission seal-
ers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each
fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension —
If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Con-
trol Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)/
Brake Vacuum Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control
Module/Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp
Leveling
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Module/Electronic Limited
Slip Differentials — If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/
Steering Column Lock
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights —
If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/
Rain Sensor
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module
— If Equipped
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM — If Equipped
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability
Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power
Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/
Anti-Intrusion Module
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise
Control/DTV
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped / Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera/ParkSense
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp
Charger - If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering
Wheel - If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats/Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance
Systems Module/DSRC
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High
Beams — If Equipped
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) Bi-Halogen Headlamps (Base)
9005SL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
(Uplevel)
9005SL+
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base) 3157NAK
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium) 3157NAK
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp (Uplevel &
Premium)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a
headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to replace the bulb
from the right hand lamp, or to the right to replace the
bulb from the left hand lamp.
2. Turn the access cap located on the wheel liner coun-
terclockwise to remove from liner.
3. Locate the headlamp bulb access cap through the
opening in the wheel liner.
4. Firmly grasp the access cap and rotate counterclock-
wise to remove lamp housing.
5. Firmly grasp the low/high beam bulb and connector
assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector and then connect
the replacement bulb.
7. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
8. Install the bulb access cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Install the access cap in the wheel liner and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp
housing.
2. Remove the bulb from the connector and install the
replacement bulb.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
CAUTION!
•
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See
your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) coun-
ter clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
dealer for replacement.
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certi-
fied)
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certi-
fied)
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent) –
Without Trailer Tow Package
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
U.S. Metric
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent) – With
Trailer Tow Package
11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow
Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – With Trailer Tow
Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not
use E-85).
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message
to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
688 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your ve-
hicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 689
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
Change transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
690 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 691
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................695
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............695
▫ Prepare A List ........................695
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............695
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............695
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............696
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........696
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................697
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........697
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................697
▫ Service Contract ......................697
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............699
䡵 MOPARPARTS........................699
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............699
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .699
▫ In Canada...........................699
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............700
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 695
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
696 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 697
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
698 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 699
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
700 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 701
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
702 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................500
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .201
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............646
Adding Fuel .............................553
Additives, Fuel ...........................548
Adjust
Forward ..........................148, 149
Rearward .........................148, 149
AirBag.................................71
Advance Front Air Bag .................71, 72
Air Bag Operation .......................74
Air Bag Warning Light ....................82
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................75
Enhanced Accident Response ............82, 618
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..............85, 618
FrontAirBag...........................71
If A Deployment Occurs ...................80
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................75
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............84
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............84
Side Air Bags ...........................75
Transporting Pets .......................112
Air Bag Deployment ........................71
Air Bag Light ......................82, 115, 302
Air Bag Maintenance .......................84
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .631
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................633
Air Conditioning Filter ..................433, 635
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........432, 434
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone .................428
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............633, 634
Air Conditioning System.................426, 633
Air Pressure, Tires.........................528
Alarm
Arm The System ........................21
Disarm The System .......................22
Alarm, Panic .............................26
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................21, 305
704 INDEX
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................21
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................484
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............645, 679
Disposal ..............................648
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................501
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................322
Appearance Care .........................655
Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............21
Assist, Hill Start ..........................504
Auto Down Power Windows ..................46
Automatic Headlights ......................179
Automatic High Beams .....................180
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......418, 426
Automatic Transmission .................475, 655
Adding Fluid ..........................655
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................655
Fluid Change ..........................655
Fluid Level Check ...................653, 654
Fluid Type .........................653, 683
Gear Ranges ...........................476
Special Additives .......................654
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........263
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................263
Axle Fluid ..............................683
Battery .............................307, 632
Charging System Light ...................307
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ...............27
Belts, Seat...............................115
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................137
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................638
B-Pillar Location ..........................521
Brake Assist System .......................503
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............500
Brake Fluid ..........................650, 683
Brake System .........................500, 650
Anti-Lock
(ABS) ........................500
10
INDEX 705
Fluid Check ...........................650
Master Cylinder ........................650
Parking ..............................497
Warning Light .........................303
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................473
Bulb Replacement......................673, 675
Bulbs, Light .............................117
Camera, Rear ............................245
Capacities, Fluid ..........................679
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................602
Oil (Engine) ...........................629
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................647
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............114,552
Cargo Area Cover .........................280
Cargo Area Features .......................278
Cargo Compartment .......................278
Light ................................280
Luggage Carrier ........................285
Cargo Light .............................280
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................281
Car Washes .............................656
Cellular Phone ...........................416
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............678
Certification Label.........................556
Chains, Tire .............................539
Changing A Flat Tire .......................588
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................516
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .624
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............113
Checks, Safety............................113
Child Restraint ............................86
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................91
Child Restraints .........................86
Child Seat Installation ....................107
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......103
706 INDEX
Infants And Child Restraints ................89
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .102
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................104
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............97
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......93
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........89
Seating Positions ........................92
Child Safety Locks .........................37
Clean Air Gasoline ........................548
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................657
Climate Control ..........................418
Automatic ............................418
Cold Weather Operation ....................465
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............415
Compact Spare Tire ........................533
Console, Overhead ........................247
Contract, Service ..........................697
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........647
Cooling System...........................644
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............646
Coolant Capacity .......................679
Coolant Level ..........................648
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................648
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................645
Inspection .........................644, 648
Points To Remember .....................649
Pressure Cap ..........................647
Radiator Cap ..........................647
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......645, 679, 681
Corrosion Protection .......................655
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................201
Cruise Light..........................329, 333
Cupholders ..........................269, 270
Customer Assistance .......................695
Data Recorder, Event .......................85
10
INDEX 707
Daytime Running Lights ....................181
Dealer Service............................626
Defroster, Rear Window.....................284
Defroster, Windshield ......................116
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................627
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................614
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................648
Door Ajar...............................312
Door Ajar Light ..........................312
Door Locks ..............................34
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......37
Door Locks ..........................34, 37
KeyFob...............................34
Remote ...............................34
Remote Keyless Entry .....................34
Door Opener, Garage.......................250
Driver Information Display
DID.................................339
Instrument Cluster Display ................339
Driving ................................490
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) .......393
Economy (Fuel) Mode ......................474
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........263
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................284
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................135
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case.............484
Electronic Brake Control System ...............500
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................501
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................512
Traction Control System ...................507
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) ..................196, 197, 201
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............507
708 INDEX
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........310
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................608
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................585
Jacking ...............................588
Jump Starting ..........................603
Tow Hooks ............................609
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........624
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................631
Block Heater ..........................471
Break-In Recommendations ................112
Compartment .......................621, 622
Compartment Identification .............621, 622
Cooling ..............................644
Exhaust Gas Caution .................114,552
Fails To Start ..........................466
Flooded, Starting .......................466
Fuel Requirements ...................547, 679
Jump Starting ..........................603
Oil ..............................627, 679
Oil Filler Cap ..........................629
Oil Filter .............................630
Oil Selection ....................628, 679, 681
Overheating ...........................585
Starting ..............................462
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................629
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................629
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........82, 618
Entry System, Illuminated ....................23
Ethanol ................................549
Event Data Recorder ........................85
Exhaust Gas Caution....................114,552
Exhaust System .......................114,641
Exterior Lights ........................117,673
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................631
10
INDEX 709
Air Conditioning ....................433, 635
Engine Oil ............................630
Engine Oil Disposal .....................630
Flashers ................................585
Hazard Warning ........................585
Turn Signal ..................117,328, 677, 678
Flooded Engine Starting ....................466
Fluid Capacities ..........................679
Fluid Leaks .............................117
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................654
Brake ................................650
Engine Oil ............................627
Fluids .................................683
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........681
Fog Lights ..............................677
Fog Light Service .........................677
Folding Rear Seat .........................163
Forward Collision Warning ..................229
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................585
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................608
Front Axle (Differential).....................651
Fuel...................................547
Adding ..............................553
Additives .............................548
Clean Air .............................548
Economy Mode ........................474
Ethanol ..............................549
Gasoline ..............................547
Light ................................321
Materials Added ........................548
Methanol .............................549
Octane Rating ..........................547
Requirements .......................547, 679
Specifications ..........................681
T
ank Capacity ..........................679
Fueling ................................553
710 INDEX
Fuses ..................................663
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)..............250
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................548
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................547
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................548
Gear Ranges .............................476
General Information .......................546
Glass Cleaning ...........................661
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................560
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................559
GVWR .................................556
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................585
Headlights ..............................675
Automatic ............................179
Bulb Replacement .......................676
Cleaning .............................661
On With Wipers ........................179
Passing ..............................187
Replacing .............................676
Heated Mirrors .......................136, 284
Heater, Engine Block .......................471
Hill Start Assist...........................504
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................562
Holder, Cup .............................270
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............250
Hood Release ............................176
Ignition
Key..................................14
Illuminated Entry ..........................23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................18
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................126, 127
Instrument Cluster ...........298, 306, 311, 326, 328
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............297
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............662
10
INDEX 711
Interior Appearance Care....................660
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............189
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................268
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................390
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .........594
Jacking Instructions........................595
Jack Location ............................589
Jack Operation ........................588, 595
Jump Starting ............................603
KeyFob.................................15
Arm The Alarm .........................21
Disarm The Alarm .......................22
Panic Alarm ............................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........20, 27
Unlock Liftgate .........................49
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ....27
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry). . .24, 27
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry ................24
Key-In Reminder ..........................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go........................463
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................364
Passive Entry ...........................39
Passive Entry Programming .............39, 364
Unlock Liftgate ......................49, 364
Keyless Entry System .......................24
Keyless Go...............................14
Key, Replacement ..........................19
Keys ...................................14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................18
Lane Change Assist........................187
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................57
Latches ................................117
Lead Free Gasoline ........................547
Leaks, Fluid .............................117
712 INDEX
Life Of Tires .............................537
Liftgate .................................49
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............283
Light Bulbs..............................117
Lights ..............................117,178
AirBag ........................82, 115, 302
Automatic Headlights ....................179
Brake Assist Warning ....................511
Brake Warning .........................303
Bulb Replacement .......................675
Cargo ...............................280
Center Mounted Stop ....................678
Cruise ............................329, 333
Daytime Running .......................181
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................178
Engine Temperature Warning ...............306
Exterior ..............................117
Fog .................................677
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................585
Headlights .........................675, 676
Headlights On With Wipers ................179
Illuminated Entry ........................23
Low Fuel .............................321
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........314
Map Reading ..........................184
Park .............................327, 331
Passing ..............................187
Reading ...........................184, 248
Rear Servicing .........................678
Rear Tail Lamps ........................678
Seat Belt Reminder ......................301
Security Alarm .........................305
Service ...............................675
Side Marker ...........................678
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............318
Traction Control ........................511
Turn Signal ..............117,178, 328, 677, 678
Vanity Mirror ..........................137
10
INDEX 713
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .306, 328
Loading Vehicle ..........................556
Tires ................................521
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode ......................348
Battery Saver On .......................348
Electrical Load Reduction .................348
Intelligent Battery Sensor ..................348
Locks ..................................34
Child Protection .........................37
Door .................................34
Power Door ............................36
Lubrication, Body .........................638
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................285
Lug Nuts ...............................586
Maintenance Free Battery....................632
Maintenance Procedures ....................627
Maintenance Schedule ......................686
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .314, 624
Manual, Service ..........................700
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............172
Memory Seat ............................172
Memory Seats And Radio ...................172
Methanol ...............................549
Mirrors ................................126
Electric Powered ........................135
Electric Remote .........................135
Exterior Folding ........................134
Heated ...............................136
Outside ..............................127
Rearview ..........................126, 127
Vanity ...............................137
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............9
MOPAR Parts.........................626, 699
Multi-Function Control Lever .................178
714 INDEX
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................112
Occupant Restraints ........................53
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................547
Oil, Engine ..........................339, 627
Capacity .............................679
Change Interval ........................628
Dipstick ..............................627
Disposal ..............................630
Filter ................................630
Filter Disposal .........................630
Identification Logo ......................629
Materials Added To ......................630
Pressure Warning Light ...................308
Recommendation ....................628, 679
Viscosity ..........................629, 679
Oil Filter, Change .........................630
Oil Filter, Selection ........................631
Oil Pressure Light .........................308
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................623
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............250
Operating Precautions ......................623
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............6
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................127
Overhead Console.........................247
Overheating, Engine .......................585
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........6,700
Paint Care ..............................655
Panic Alarm ..............................26
Parking Brake............................497
ParkSense System, Rear .....................233
Passing Light ............................187
Passive Entry .............................39
Personalized Menu Bar .....................435
Pets ...................................112
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........522
10
INDEX 715
Power
Brakes ...............................500
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................664
Door Locks ............................36
Inverter ..............................268
Lift Gate ..............................50
Mirrors ..............................135
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........263
Seats .............................147, 149
Steering ...........................496, 683
Sunroof ..............................259
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............194
Windows ..............................44
Power Seats
Forward ..........................148, 149
Rearward .........................148, 149
Recline ...............................148
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............64
Preparation For Jacking .....................594
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................64
Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry) ....24
Quadra-Trac .............................484
Radial Ply Tires ..........................529
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........647
Radio Frequency
General Information ............18, 20, 30, 34, 44
Radio Operation ..........................416
Radio Remote Controls .....................414
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................390
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................192
Rear Air Conditioning ......................428
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................651
Rear Camera ............................245
Rear Cross Path ..........................143
Rear Cupholder ..........................270
716 INDEX
Rear ParkSense System .....................233
Rear Seat, Folding .........................163
Rear Window Features .....................283
Rear Wiper/Washer........................283
Reclining Front Seats .......................151
Recorder, Event Data .......................85
Recreational Towing .......................574
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ........577
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ......580
Reformulated Gasoline .....................548
Refrigerant ..............................634
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................55
Remote Control
Starting System .........................30
Remote Keyless Entry .......................24
Arm The Alarm .........................21
Disarm The Alarm .......................22
Panic Alarm ............................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........20, 27
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........414
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................32
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .33, 366
Uconnect Settings ....................33, 366
Remote Starting System......................30
Replacement Bulbs ........................673
Replacement Keys .........................19
Replacement Parts.........................626
Replacement Tires .........................538
Reporting Safety Defects ....................699
Restraints, Child...........................86
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................280
Roll Over Warning ..........................5
Roof Type Carrier .........................285
Rotation, Tires ...........................541
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................115
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................117
10
INDEX 717
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................699
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................114
Safety Information, Tire .....................515
Safety Tips ..............................113
Schedule, Maintenance .....................686
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......62
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........65
Energy Management Feature ................65
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................59
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................57
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............61
Pregnant Women ........................64
Seat Belt Extender .......................63
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................64
Seat Belt Reminder .......................55
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................662
Seat Belt Reminder .........................55
Seat Belts.............................55, 115
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................62
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........62
Child Restraint ..........................86
Extender ..............................63
Front Seat ........................55, 57, 59
Inspection ............................115
Operating Instructions ....................59
Pregnant Women ........................64
Pretensioners ...........................64
Rear Seat ..............................57
Reminder .............................301
Untwisting Procedure .....................61
Seats .....................146, 147, 148, 149, 154
Adjustment .....................148, 149, 150
Easy Entry ............................175
Heated ...............................154
Memory ..............................172
Power ...............................149
Rear Folding ..........................163
718 INDEX
Reclining .............................151
Vented ...............................158
Ventilated .............................158
Security Alarm.........................21, 305
Arm The System ........................21
Disarm The System .......................22
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming .......................20
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................18
Sentry Key Replacement .....................19
Service Assistance .........................695
Service Contract ..........................697
Service Manuals ..........................700
Shifting ................................471
Automatic Transmission ...............471, 475
Shoulder Belts ............................57
Signals, Turn...................117,328, 677, 678
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................539
Snow Plow..............................573
Snow Tires ..............................531
Spare Tire.....................532, 533, 535, 590
Spark Plugs ..........................681, 683
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ........................198, 200
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ..................208
Cancel ...............................198
Resume ..............................198
Set..................................198
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........196, 197, 201
Starting..............................30, 462
Automatic Transmission ..................462
Cold Weather .......................465, 471
Engine Block Heater .....................471
Engine Fails To Start .....................466
Remote ...............................30
Starting And Operating .....................462
Starting Procedures ........................462
10
INDEX 719
Steering
Power ...............................496
Tilt Column ........................193, 194
Wheel, Heated .........................195
Wheel, Tilt .........................193, 194
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............414
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .414
Storage ................................672
Storage, Vehicle .......................433, 672
Storing Your Vehicle .......................672
Sunglasses Storage ........................249
Sun Roof ...............................259
Sun Visor Extension .......................137
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........71
Sway Control, Trailer.......................513
System, Remote Starting .....................30
Telescoping Steering Column..............193, 194
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........426
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................281
Tilt Steering Column....................193, 194
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......521, 522
Tire Markings ............................515
Tires.....................117,526, 532, 533, 701
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................537
Air Pressure ...........................526
Chains ...............................539
Changing .........................588, 602
Compact Spare .........................533
Flat Changing ..........................602
General Information ...............526, 532, 533
High Speed ...........................529
Inflation Pressures .......................528
Jacking ...............................588
Life Of Tires ...........................537
Load Capacity ......................521, 522
Pressure Warning Light ...................318
Quality Grading ........................701
720 INDEX
Radial ...............................529
Replacement .......................538, 602
Rotation ..............................541
Safety ............................515, 526
Sizes ................................516
Snow Tires ............................531
Spare Tire ...................532, 533, 535, 590
Spinning .............................536
Trailer Towing .........................569
Tread Wear Indicators ....................536
Wheel Mounting ........................602
Tire Safety Information .....................515
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................567
Tow Hooks, Emergency .....................609
Towing .............................559, 614
Disabled Vehicle ........................614
Guide ...............................564
Recreational ...........................574
Weight ...............................564
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........574
Traction Control ..........................507
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................513
Trailer Towing ...........................559
Cooling System Tips .....................573
Hitches ..............................562
Minimum Requirements ..................567
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................567
Wiring ...............................570
Trailer Towing Guide.......................564
Trailer Weight............................564
Transfer Case ............................652
Electronically Shifted .....................484
Fluid ................................683
Maintenance ...........................652
T
ransmission ............................475
Automatic .........................475, 653
Fluid ................................683
Maintenance ...........................653
10
INDEX 721
Shifting ..............................471
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....250
Transporting Pets .........................112
Tread Wear Indicators ......................536
Turn Signals ......................328, 677, 678
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features .........33, 366
Operation .............................390
Screen Activated Features ..................25
Uconnect Settings ..................26, 33, 366
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information ...................456
Do Not Disturb ........................455
Siri Eyes Free ..........................455
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .....................449
Uconnect Settings ..........................25
Customer Programmable Features . . . .37, 39, 49, 364
Passive Entry Programming ........37, 39, 49, 364
Uconnect Settings ....................49, 364
Uconnect Voice Command ...................436
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................701
Universal Transmitter ......................250
Unleaded Gasoline ........................547
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................61
Vanity Mirrors ...........................137
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............8
Vehicle Loading .......................522, 556
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............9
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........21
Vehicle Storage........................433, 672
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................629
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................436
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................585
Warning, Roll Over .........................5
722 INDEX
Warnings And Cautions ......................8
Warranty Information ......................699
Washers, Windshield....................188, 641
Washing Vehicle ..........................656
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................657
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................657
Wind Buffeting ........................49, 262
Window Fogging .........................433
Windows ................................44
Power ................................44
Wind Buffeting ..........................49
Windshield Defroster.......................116
Windshield Washers .......................188
Fluid ................................641
Windshield Wiper Blades....................638
Windshield Wipers ........................188
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................638
Wipers, Intermittent .......................189
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................192
10
INDEX 723
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Durango
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Durango
Fourth Edition Rev 2
Printed in U.S.A.
16WD01-126-AD
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
